LG | KM501 | Owner's Manual | LG KM501 Owner's manual

LG KM501 Owner's manual
ENGLISH
MMBB0275223(1.0) W
ELECTRONICS INC.
KM501
www.lgmobile.com
KM501 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
ENGLISH
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
KM501
MMBB0275223(1.0) W
www.lgmobile.com
Bluetooth QD ID B013379
Some of the contents in this manual
may differ from your phone depending
on the software of the phone or your
service provider.
KM501 User Guide
Congratulations on your purchase of the
advanced and compact KM501 phone by
LG, designed to operate with the latest
digital mobile communication technology.
SET UP
01
YOUR STANDBY SCREEN
02
THE BASICS
03
GET CREATIVE
04
GET ORGANISED
05
THE WEB
06
SETTINGS
07
ACCESSORIES
08
Contents
01 SET UP
Getting to know your phone .....................8
Installing the SIM and battery ................10
Memory card .........................................12
Menu map .............................................13
02 YOUR STANDBY SCREEN
The status bar .....................................14
03 THE BASICS
Calls ......................................................16
Making a call.......................................16
Making a call from your contacts ..........16
Answering and rejecting a call ..............16
In-call options......................................17
Adjusting the call volume ....................17
Speed dialling......................................18
Viewing your call logs ..........................18
Using call divert ...................................19
Using call barring.................................19
Changing the call settings ....................20
4
LG KM501 | User Guide
Contacts ................................................21
Searching for a contact ........................21
Adding a new contact ..........................21
Contact options ...................................21
Adding a contact to a group .................22
Renaming a group ...............................22
Adding a picture to a contact ................23
Copying your contacts to your SIM ........23
Deleting all your contacts .....................23
Viewing information .............................23
Messaging .............................................24
Messaging ..........................................24
Sending a message .............................24
Entering text ........................................24
Message folders ..................................25
Managing your messages ....................25
Using templates...................................26
Changing your text message settings ....26
Changing your multimedia message
settings ...............................................27
Changing your other settings ................27
04 GET CREATIVE
Camera..................................................28
Taking a quick photo ............................28
After you’ve taken your photo ...............28
Using your toolbar options ....................28
Changing the image size ......................29
Viewing your saved photos ...................29
Using zoom when viewing a photo ........30
Setting a photo as wallpaper
or Picture ID ........................................30
Video camera.........................................31
Shooting a quick video .........................31
After you’ve shot your video .................31
Using your toolbar options ....................31
Watching your saved videos .................32
Adjusting the volume when viewing
a video ................................................32
My stuff .................................................33
Images ...............................................33
Images options menu...........................33
Sending a photo ..................................34
Organising your images .......................34
Deleting an image ...............................34
Deleting multiple images ......................34
Creating a slide show...........................35
Sounds ...............................................35
Using a sound .....................................35
Videos ................................................35
Watching a video .................................35
Using options while video is paused ......36
Sending a video clip ............................36
Using the video options menu ..............36
Others ................................................36
Games and Apps .................................37
Playing a game....................................37
Using the games options menu.............37
External memory .................................37
Using your phone as a Mass storage
device ................................................37
Transferring a file to your phone ...........38
Multimedia ............................................39
Music ................................................39
Transferring music onto your phone ......39
Playing a song .....................................39
Using options while playing music.........40
Creating a playlist ................................40
Playing a playlist ..................................40
Editing a playlist ..................................41
Deleting a playlist ................................41
Using the radio ....................................42
Searching for stations ..........................42
Resetting channels ..............................43
Listening to the radio ...........................43
Voice recorder .....................................43
Sending a voice recording ...................43
5
Contents
05 GET ORGANISED
07 SETTINGS
Organiser/Tools......................................44
Adding an event to your calendar..........44
Editing a calendar event .......................44
Sharing a calendar event......................45
Adding a memo ...................................45
Adding an event to your To do list .........45
Setting your alarm ...............................45
Using your calculator ...........................46
Using Tip calculator .............................46
Using the stopwatch ............................46
Converting a unit .................................46
Adding a city to your world clock ..........47
Settings .................................................50
Personalising your profiles....................50
Changing your screen settings..............50
Changing your phone settings ..............51
Changing your connectivity settings ......51
Sending and receiving your files using
Bluetooth ............................................52
Pairing with another Bluetooth device ...53
Using a Bluetooth headset ....................53
Changing your security settings ............54
06 THE WEB
The web ................................................48
Accessing the web...............................48
Adding and accessing bookmarks.........48
Saving a page .....................................49
Accessing a saved page.......................49
Viewing your browser history ................49
Changing the web browser settings ......49
6
LG KM501 | User Guide
08 ACCESSORIES
Accessories ...........................................55
Network service.....................................56
Technical data .......................................56
General ...............................................56
Ambient Temperatures .........................56
Guidelines for safe and efficient use ......58
7
Getting to know your phone
Charger, Cable,
Handsfree connector
End/Power key
Volume
Ends or rejects a call.
Turns the phone on/off.
Press once to return to
the standby screen.
Clear key
Deletes a character with
each press. Use this
key to go back to the
previous screen.
Main screen
Call key
Dials a phone number
and answers incoming
calls.
Capture
button
Set up
8
LG KM501 | User Guide
Headset
connector
01
02
03
Battery cover
Camera lens
Flash
04
05
06
07
08
Memory card slot
SIM card
Battery
Set up
9
Installing the SIM and battery
1 Remove the battery cover
Press and hold down the battery release
button at the top of the phone and pull off
the battery cover.
2 Remove the battery
Lever the top edge of the battery and
remove it carefully from the battery
compartment.
WARNING: Do not use your fingernail
when removing the battery
WARNING: Do not remove the battery
when the phone is switched on, as this may
damage the phone.
Set up
5 Replace the battery cover
Insert the bottom of the battery cover into
the edge of the battery compartment and
push it until it the cover clicks into place.
10
LG KM501 | User Guide
01
02
03
04
05
3 Install the SIM card
Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder.
Make sure that the gold color contact area
on the card is facing downwards.
To remove the SIM card, pull it gently in
the reverse direction.
4 Install the battery
Insert the bottom of the battery first
into the bottom edge of the battery
compartment. Ensure the battery contacts
align with the terminals on the phone.
Press down the top of the battery until it
clips into place.
6 Charging your phone
Slide back the cover of the charger socket
on the side of your KM501. Insert the
charger and plug into a mains electricity
socket. Your KM501 will need to be
charged until a message reading Fully
Charged appears on screen.
06
07
08
Set up
11
Memory card
Installing a memory card
Transferring your contacts
You can expand the memory space available
on your phone using a memory card. The
KM501 will support a memory card of up
to 2 GB.
1 Remove the battery cover and battery as
shown on pages 10-11.
2 Slide the memory card into the slot at the
top, until it clicks into place. Make sure
that the gold color contact area is facing
upwards.
To transfer your contacts from your SIM to
your phone:
1 From the standby screen press the
or
, and choose
.
2 Select Copy all.
3 Choose SIM to Phone then Keep
original or Delete original.
4 Select OK to confirm.
3 Replace the battery cover as shown.
Set up
12
LG KM501 | User Guide
Menu map
GAMES &
APPS
1 Games
2 Applications
3 Network
Profiles
CALL HISTORY
ORGANISER
MULTIMEDIA
01
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Calendar
2 Memo
3 To do
1
2
3
4
02
All calls
Missed calls
Dialled calls
Received calls
Call duration
Data information
Camera
Video camera
FM radio
Voice recorder
03
04
05
06
MESSAGING
MY STUFF
PROFILES
CONTACTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
New message
Inbox
Email box
Bluetooth box
Drafts
Outbox
Sent
Listen to voicemail
Info messages
Templates
Settings
Images
Sounds
Videos
Others
Games & Apps
BROWSER
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alarm clock
Calculator
Tip calculator
Stopwatch
Unit converter
World clock
Home
Yahoo
Bookmarks
Go to URL
History
Saved pages
Settings
Information
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Groups
Copy all
Delete all
Settings
Information
MP3 PLAYER
SETTINGS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Now playing*
All songs
My playlist
Artists
Albums
Genres
Shuffle all
songs
* Only appears when
music is playing.
Date & Time
Languages
Display
Connectivity
Call
Security
Flight mode
Power saving
Reset
Memory status
07
08
Set up
TOOLS
General
Silent
Vibrate only
Outdoor
Headset
13
Your standby screen
The status bar
The status bar uses various icons to indicate
things like signal strength, new messages
and battery life, as well as telling you whether
your Bluetooth is active.
Below is a table explaining the meaning of
icons you are likely to see in the status bar.
Icon
Your standby screen
14
Icon
Description
Vibrate profile in use
General profile in use
Outdoor profile in use
Description
Silent profile in use
Network signal strength (number
of bars will vary)
Headset profile in use
No network signal
Calls are diverted
Remaining battery life
GPRS available
Battery empty
EDGE available
New text message
Roaming
New voice message
Flight mode is selected
Message inbox is full
Bluetooth
New text+voice message
An alarm is set
LG KM501 | User Guide
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Your standby screen
15
Calls
Making a call
Answering and rejecting a call
1 Key in the number using the keypad.
When your phone rings press the
key
to answer the call.
While your phone is ringing, select Silent
to mute the ringing. This is great if you’ve
forgotten to change your profile to Silent for
a meeting.
Press the
key to reject the incoming call.
To delete a digit press C.
2 Press the
key to initiate the call.
3 To end the call, press the
key.
TIP! Enter + when making an
international call, press and hold 0.
Making a call from your contacts
1 Press the
key to open the address
book.
2 Using the keypad to enter the first letter of
the contact you want to call. For example
for Office, press 6 three times.
3 To scroll through the contacts and their
different numbers use
and .
4 Press the
key to initiate the call.
The Basics
16
LG KM501 | User Guide
TIP! You can change the settings on
your phone to answer your calls in different
or
and , select
and
ways. Press the
choose Calling.
Select Answer mode and choose from Slide
open, Any key or Send key only.
In-call options
01
02
Adjusting the call volume
To adjust the volume during a call, press the
volume keys on the right-hand side of your
phone.
Options - Choose from a list of further in-call
options, including Contacts and Messaging
so you can check your messages and add
contacts during a call.
03
04
05
06
07
08
The Basics
17
Calls
Speed dialling
Viewing your call logs
You can assign a speed dial number to a
contact you call frequently.
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Select Speed dials.
3 Your voicemail is set to speed dial 1. You
cannot change this. Select any other
number either by using the
and
keys, and pressing the
to select
Assign, or by pressing the hard key
number.
4 Your address book will open. Select the
contact you would like to assign to that
number using the
and
keys, then
select OK.
Press
or
and select
to view:
All calls - View the complete list of all your
dialled, received and missed calls.
Missed calls - View the list of any calls you
have missed.
Dialled calls - View the list of all the
numbers you have called.
Received calls - View the list of all the
numbers that have called you.
Call duration - View details of how long you
have spent on your calls.
Call costs – View the charges applied to
your dialled numbers and the call duration of
all your received and dialled calls. This service
is network dependent, some operators are
unable to support this.
Data information – View the amount of all
your received and sent data in kilobytes.
To call a speed dial number, press and
hold the assigned number until the contact
appears on screen. The call will initiate
automatically; there’s no need to press
.
TIP! From any call log select Options
and choose Delete to delete selected or all the
recorded items.
The Basics
TIP! Using
and
, highlight any
single call entry to view the date and time of the
call. To view the call duration select Options and
choose View.
18
LG KM501 | User Guide
Using call divert
1 Press
2
3
4
5
or
, select
Using call barring
and choose
Calling.
Select Call divert.
Choose whether to divert all calls, when
the line is busy, when there is no reply or
when you are out of reach.
Choose Activate and select whether to
divert to voicemail, another number or your
favourite number.
Enter your divert number or select
Contacts to browse for your divert
number.
Note: Charges are incurred for diverting
calls. Please contact your network provider
for details.
TIP! To turn off all call diverts, choose
Cancel all from the Call divert menu.
1 Press
or , select
and choose
Security.
2 Select Call Barring.
3 Choose any or all of the seven options:
All outgoing
Outgoing international
O/G international except home
country
All incoming
Incoming when abroad
Cancel all barrings
Change password
4 Select Activate and enter the call barring
password. Please check with your network
operator for this service.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
TIP! Select Fixed dial number from
the Security menu to turn on and compile
a list of numbers which can be called from
your phone. You’ll need your PIN2 code from
your operator. When activated, only numbers
included in the fixed dial list can be called
from your phone.
The Basics
19
Calls
Changing the call settings
1 Press
or , select
and choose
Calling.
2 From here you can amend the settings for:
Call divert – Choose whether to divert
your calls.
Answer mode – Choose whether to
answer the phone using the accept key,
any key or by sliding your handset open.
Send my number – Choose whether your
number will be displayed when you call
someone.
Call waiting – Be alerted when you have
a call waiting.
Minute minder – Select On to hear a
tone every minute during a call.
Auto redial – Choose On or Off.
Closed User Group – Choose Default, On
or OFF
Send DTMF tones – Choose On or Off.
The Basics
20
LG KM501 | User Guide
Contacts
Searching for a contact
Contact options
Press
or , select
and choose
Search.
Or, using the slightly quicker method…
1 Press
from the standby screen.
2 Enter the first letter of the contact you
want to call.
3 To scroll through the contacts and their
different numbers use
and .
There are many things you can do when
viewing a contact. Here’s how to access and
use the options menu:
1 Open the contact you’d like to use. See
Searching for a contact above.
2 Press
to open the list of options.
From here you can:
Edit - Change any of the contact’s details.
Send via - Send the contact’s details to
another person as a business card. Choose
to send as a Text message, Multimedia
message, via Bluetooth or by Email.
Delete - Delete the contact. Select OK or
press
if you are sure.
New contact - Add a new contact.
Copy to SIM/Phone - Choose to move or
copy to the SIM card or phone (depending
on where you originally saved the contact).
Adding a new contact
1 Press
or , select
and choose
New Contact.
2 Choose whether to store your new contact
on your Phone or SIM card.
3 Enter all the information you have in the
fields provided and select Save.
Or, using the slightly quicker method…
1 Enter the number you wish to store from
the standby screen and select Options
and choose Save, Set number type.
2 Enter the relevant information as above
and select Save.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
The Basics
Note: When you are storing a contact’s email
address, press
to enter a symbol and
scroll with
and
until you see @.
01
21
Contacts
Adding a contact to a group
Renaming a group
You can collect your contacts into groups,
for example, keeping your work colleagues
and family separate. There are a number of
groups including Friends, Colleagues and
VIP already set up on the phone.
1 Press
or , select
and choose
Groups.
2 Scroll to the group you wish to add a
contact to and select Add member.
3 Your contacts will open. Scroll to any
contacts you would like to add to the group
and select Options and Mark all (or just
press ), then Done.
You can rename any of the groups to fit your
lifestyle.
1 Press
or , select
and choose
Groups.
2 Highlight the one you want to rename.
3 Choose Options, select Rename and enter
your new group name.
TIP! You can assign a ringtone or icon to a
group. Select the group you wish to assign
the ringtone or icon to and select Options and
choose an item you want.
The Basics
22
LG KM501 | User Guide
4 Select Save.
Note: You can only assign a contact to a
group or add a picture to a contact that is
saved on your Phone (not SIM) memory.
Adding a picture to a contact
Deleting all your contacts
You can change the appearance of your contacts
in your address book to include a picture.
1 Press
or , select
and choose
Settings.
2 Select View Options and choose With
picture.
3 Then return to the address book and select
the contact you want to add a photo to.
4 Choose Options and select Edit.
5 Scroll down to the Picture section.
Choose Options and select New Picture.
Your camera viewfinder will open, so
you can take a picture of your contact.
Alternatively you can select a picture from
the Image file.
1 Press
Copying your contacts to your SIM
, select
and choose
02
2 Select to delete contacts from SIM or
Phone.
05
Viewing information
, select
03
04
3 Select OK if you are sure.
Press
or
Information.
01
and choose
From here you can view Service dial
numbers, your Own number and your My
business card.
06
07
08
TIP! If you haven’t yet created a business
card, the My business card screen will give
you the option to create one. Select New and
enter your details as you would for any contact.
Choose Save.
The Basics
You can also choose to copy your contacts
from your SIM to your handset or from your
handset to your SIM.
1 Press
or , select
and choose
Copy All.
2 Select to copy the contacts from SIM to
phone or Phone to SIM.
3 Choose whether to keep the original
records or delete them.
or
Delete all.
23
Messaging
The Basics
24
Messaging
7 Enter the phone number or select Options
Your KM501 combines Text messages,
Multimedia messages, Bluetooth messages
and Email into one intuitive and easy to use
menu. Simply Press
or
and select
.
and choose Contacts to open your
contacts list.
You can add multiple contacts.
8 Select Options and choose Send or just
press .
Sending a message
Entering text
The quick way to begin sending a Text
message is to press
from the standby
screen and go straight to step 5 below.
Otherwise:
1 Press
or , select
and then
New message.
2 Choose to send Text, Multimedia or
Bluetooth.
3 A new message will open.
4 Enter your message using T9 predictive
mode or Abc manual mode.
See Entering text to see how to switch
between the different text entry modes.
5 Select Options and choose Insert to add
a symbol, image, animation, sound, text
template, contact or business card.
6 Select Options and choose Send to or just
press .
There are two ways to enter text:
T9 predictive and Abc manual.
To turn on T9 predictive text, begin a
new message, choose Options, select T9
languages and choose T9 on. With T9 on,
you can switch between T9 predictive, Abc
manual and numbers by pressing
.
LG KM501 | User Guide
T9 predictive
T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to
recognise words you are rewriting based
on the key sequences you press. Simply
press the number key associated with the
letter you want to enter, and the dictionary
will recognise the word as you type. For
example, press 8, 3, 5, 3, 7, 4, 6, 6, 3 to write
‘telephone’.
If the word you want doesn’t appear, choose
Options and select New T9 word. Enter the
word using Abc manual mode and your word
or name will be added to the dictionary.
Abc manual
In Abc mode you must press the key repeatedly
to enter a letter. For example, to write ‘hello’,
press 4 twice, 3 twice, 5 three times, 5 three
times again, then 6 three times.
WARNING: You will be charged per 160
character text message for each person that
you send the message to.
Message folders
Managing your messages
You can use your Inbox to manage your
messages.
1 Press
or , select
and then
Inbox.
2 Select Options and then choose to:
View - View a selected message.
Delete - Delete a selected message.
Reply - Send a reply to the selected
message.
Forward - Send the selected message on
to another person.
Return call - Call the person who sent
you the message.
Save number - Save as a new or existing
contact.
Information - View the details of a
message, for example, the time it was
sent.
Multi Delete - Delete selected messages.
Delete all read - All opened messages
will be deleted.
Delete all - You can select whether to
delete all of each message type.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
The Basics
Press
or , select
. You’ll recognise
the folder structure used on your KM501, it’s
fairly self-explanatory.
Inbox - All the messages you receive are
placed into your inbox. From here you can
reply, forward and more, see below for details.
Email box - Contains all your email messages.
Bluetooth box - The Bluetooth box folder
contains your Bluetooth message folders.
Drafts - If you don’t have time to finish
writing a message, you can save what you
have done so far here.
Outbox - This is a temporary storage folder
while messages are being sent.
Sent - All the messages you send are placed
into your Sent folder.
Info messages - View all the info messages
and updates received from your operator.
Templates - A list of useful messages,
already written for a quick reply.
You can also access your voicemail from
here by selecting Listen voicemail and your
messaging settings by selecting Settings.
25
Messaging
If you see the message No space for SIM
message you should delete some messages
from your inbox which are saved in your
SIM Card.
If you see the message No space for
messages you can delete messages to
create space.
Using templates
The Basics
You can create templates for the Text and
Multimedia messages you send most
frequently. There are some templates already
on your phone, which you can edit if you wish.
1 Press
or , select
and then
Templates.
2 Choose Text templates or Multimedia
templates. You can then select Options
and choose Edit to change existing
templates or select Options to add New
template or Delete templates.
3 To send a template, select the one you
want to send, choose Options and select
Send via.
4 Choose how you’d like to send the
template; as a Text, Multimedia, Bluetooth
or Email message.
5 Select a contact and choose Options,
Send (or just press ).
26
LG KM501 | User Guide
Changing your text message settings
Your KM501 message settings are predefined so that you can send messages
immediately.
If you’d like to change the settings, see below
for more information.
Press
or , select
, then choose
Settings and Text message. You can make
changes to:
Message types - Convert your text into
Voice, Fax, Paging, X.400, Email or ERMES.
Validity period - Choose how long your
message is stored at the message centre.
Delivery report - Choose to receive
confirmation that your message was delivered.
Reply charging - Choose to be billed for
your message recipient’s reply.
Message centre number - Enter the details
for your message centre.
Character encoding - Choose how your
characters are encoded. This impacts the size
of your message and therefore data charges.
Bearer setting - Choose whether to send
your messages via GSM or GPRS.
Changing your multimedia message
settings
Changing your other settings
Press
or , select
, choose
Settings then:
Email - Set your email account, choose your
access point and retrieve interval, and add
a signature.
Voicemail number - Your voicemail number
is stored here. Contact your network operator
for more information on the service they
provide.
Push message - Here you can switch off
Push message, which means your messages
will no longer be pushed directly to your
device as they are received, only when you
check for new messages.
Info messages - Change the settings for
the info messages and updates received from
your operator.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
The Basics
Your KM501 message settings are predefined so that you can send messages
immediately.
If you’d like to change the settings, see below
for more information.
Press
or , select
, then choose
Settings and Multimedia message.
You can make changes to:
Subject- Include a subject field in your
multimedia messages.
Slide duration - Choose how long your
slides appear on screen.
Delivery time - Choose how long before
each message is sent.
Priority - Choose the priority level of your
multimedia message.
Validity period - Choose how long your
message is stored at the message centre.
Delivery report - Choose to allow and/or
request a delivery report.
Read report - Choose to allow and/or send
a read report.
Auto download - Choose to automatically
or manually download multimedia messages,
depending on whether you are at home or
roaming.
Network Profiles - Select a operator
specific network profile for sending
multimedia messages.
Permitted message Types - Select
which type of senders to allow multimedia
messages from.
27
Camera
Taking a quick photo
Using your toolbar options
1 Press and hold down the
Selecting Options will display a new toolbar
across the bottom of the viewfinder screen.
Use and to navigate through the toolbar
options.
key on the
right hand side of the handset and the
camera’s viewfinder will appear on screen.
2 Holding the phone horizontally, point the
lens towards the subject of the photo.
3 Press
or the
key on the right side
of the handset to take a photo.
After you’ve taken your photo
Your captured photo will appear on screen.
The name of the image runs along the bottom
of the screen.
Select Options to open a sub menu where
you can choose to take a New Photo, set your
image as Wallpaper or Picture ID, look at
the other photos in your Album, or send the
photo as a Multimedia message, Bluetooth or
email. To exit the Camera, press and hold C.
Get creative
28
LG KM501 | User Guide
Resolution – See Changing the image
size on page 29.
Quality - Choose between Normal, Fine
and Super fine. The finer the quality the
sharper a photo will be but the file size will
increase as a result. You’ll be able to store
fewer larger photo files in your memory.
Flash – Turn the flash On or Off.
The flash is set to Off as default, saving
battery power. Whenever you exit the camera
it will return to the default Off setting.
Self timer - The delay-timer allows
you to set a delay after the capture button
is pressed. Choose from Off, 3 seconds,
5 seconds or 10 seconds. Great for that
group photo you want to be part of.
Multi shot - This enables you to take
up to nine shots automatically in very quick
succession. Great for taking photos of moving
objects or at sporting events.
Colour effect – Choose from four colour
tone options: Off (normal/colour), Sepia,
Mono (black and white) or Negative.
White balance - The white balance
ensures that any white in your photo is
realistic. In order for your camera to correctly
adjust the white balance you may need to
determine the light conditions. Choose from
Auto, Daylight, Incandescent, Cloudy or
Fluorescent.
Shutter tone - Select one of the three
shutter sounds or switch the sound off.
Reset settings – Choose Yes to reset
your phone to its original camera settings.
Changing the image size
You can change the size of the photo to save
memory space. The more pixels, the larger
the file size, which in turn means they take up
more of your memory. If you want to fit more
pictures on your phone, you can alter the pixel
number to make the file size smaller.
1 Choose Options and select
from the
toolbar.
2 Select a pixel value from the four numerical
options (QV: 320X240, V: 640X480, 1M:
1280X960, 2M: 1600X1200).
3 Select the size you would like to use and
choose OK.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Viewing your saved photos
1 You can access your saved photos from
Get creative
within the camera mode and from the
standby screen. From the viewfinder,
simply select Album. From the standby
screen you should press
or , then
select
and Images.
2 Your gallery will appear on screen.
3 Use the arrows to select the photo you
want to view and choose Options, View or
to enlarge it.
just press
29
Camera
Using zoom when viewing a photo
Use the arrow keys to move the focus area
and zoom in and out.
Setting a photo as wallpaper or
Picture ID
You can set the image to appear at certain
times. From your image gallery, use and
to select an image and choose Options, Set
as to use the selected image as wallpaper or
Picture ID for one of your contacts.
Note: Picture ID can only be added to
contacts saved to your phone, not your SIM.
Get creative
30
LG KM501 | User Guide
Video camera
Shooting a quick video
1 Press the
2
3
4
5
6
or
and select
Using your toolbar options
, then
Video camera.
Point the camera lens towards the subject
of the video.
Press
once or press the
key on the
right side of the handset to start recording.
REC will appear in the bottom left corner
of the viewfinder and a timer will show the
length of your video.
To pause the video choose Pause and
resume by selecting Resume.
Select Stop to stop recording.
After you’ve shot your video
A still image representing your captured video
will appear on screen. The name of the image
runs along the bottom the screen.
Select Options to open a sub menu where
you can choose to take a New video, play
the video, or Send the video via Multimedia
message, Bluetooth or Email, or look at the
other videos in your Album.
Selecting Options will display a new toolbar
across the bottom of the viewfinder screen.
Use the arrow keys to navigate the toolbar
options.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Get creative
Video mode – To shoot a video you
want to send in a multimedia message, select
MMS.
Resolution – If you want to fit more
videos onto your phone you can alter the pixel
number to make the file size smaller. Choose
between two options for your video, 320 x
240 or 176 x 144.
Quality - Choose between Fine, Normal
and Super Fine. The finer the quality the
sharper a video will be, but the file size
will increase as a result. You’ll be able to
store fewer larger video files in the phone’s
memory.
Flash – Turn the flash On or Off.
The flash is set to Off as default, saving
battery power.
31
Video camera
Colour effect - Choose an Image effect
to apply to the video you’re taking. Choose
from four colour tone options: Off (normal/
colour), Sepia, Mono (black and white) or
Negative.
White balance - The white balance
ensures that any white in your video is
realistic. In order for your camera to correctly
adjust the white balance you may need to
determine the light conditions. Choose from
Auto, Daylight, Incandescent, Cloudy or
Fluorescent.
Reset settings – Choose Yes to reset
your phone to it’s original video camera
settings.
TIP! The settings menu is superimposed
over the viewfinder. When you change elements
of the image colour or quality, you’ll be able to
see the image change in preview behind the
settings menu.
Get creative
32
LG KM501 | User Guide
Watching your saved videos
1 You can access your saved videos either
from within video camera mode or from
the standby screen. From the viewfinder,
simply select Album. From the standby
screen you should press
or , then
select
and Videos.
2 Your gallery will appear on screen.
3 Use the and to select the video you
want to view and choose Options, Play or
just press
to watch it.
Adjusting the volume when viewing
a video
To adjust the volume of the audio on a video
whilst it is playing, use the keys on the right
side of the handset.
My stuff
You can store any multimedia files on your
phone’s memory so that you have easy
access to all of your pictures, sounds, videos
and games. You can also save your files to a
memory card. The advantage of using a
memory card is that you can free up space on
your phone’s memory.
All your multimedia files will be saved in My
stuff. To access My stuff, press
or
then
to open a list of folders storing all of
your multimedia files.
Images
Images contains a folder of default images
pre-loaded onto your phone, images
downloaded by you and images taken on your
phone’s camera.
Images options menu
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Get creative
The options which are available to you in
Images depend on what type of image you
have selected. All of the options will be
available for pictures you have taken on the
phone’s camera. Only the View, Set as, File
info, Slide show, Sort by and Thumbnail /
List view options are available for default
images.
In the Images folder, select Options to bring
up your list of options.
View - View the selected image.
Delete - Delete the selected image.
Send via - Send the selected image to a
friend via MMS, Bluetooth or Email.
Note: The image may need to be resized
before it can be sent by MMS.
Set as - Set selected image as your
wallpaper or as a picture ID.
File - Edit image, rename or view the
information (Name, Size, Date, Image size
and Copyright) of the selected image. If you
have an external memory card inserted,
two additional options will show: Move to
external memory and Copy to external
memory.
Print via Bluetooth - Print an image file via
Bluetooth.
Slide show - See Creating a slide show on
page 35.
New folder - Create a new folder within the
main Images folder.
Multi delete - Select more than one image
to be deleted.
Delete all - Delete all the photos in your
Images folder.
Sort by - Arrange your images by Date, Type
or Name.
List view / Thumbnail view - Change the
way you view your photos.
33
My stuff
Sending a photo
Deleting an image
1 Press
1 Press
2
2 Scroll to and select Images.
3
4
5
or
then select
.
Scroll to and select Images.
Select a photo and choose Options.
Select Send via and choose from
Multimedia message, Bluetooth or
Email.
If you choose Multimedia message or
Email, your photo will be attached to the
message and you can write and send
the message as normal. If you choose
Bluetooth, you will be prompted to turn
Bluetooth on and your phone will search
for a device to send the picture to.
Organising your images
1 Press
or
then select
.
2 Scroll to and select Images.
3 Select Options then Sort by.
4 Choose from Date, Type or Name.
Get creative
34
LG KM501 | User Guide
or
then select
.
3 Select an image and choose Options.
4 Select Delete.
Deleting multiple images
1 Press
or
then select
.
2 Scroll to and select Images.
3 Choose Options and select Multi delete.
4 A box will appear next to each image.
Select the image and select Options, Mark
all or just press
to mark it. To unmark
an image, select Options, Unmark all or
just press
so that the tick disappears
from the box.
5 Once you have marked all of the
appropriate boxes, select Done and
confirm you want to delete all of the
marked images.
Creating a slide show
Sounds
If you want to look at all of the images on your
phone or scan through what you’ve got, you
can create a slide show to save you from
having to open and close each individual
image.
1 Press
or
then select
.
2 Scroll to and select Images.
3 Select the photo you would like to begin the
slideshow and choose Options.
4 Select Slide show and it will begin.
5 Select Options, Pause to pause the slide
show and Stop to end the slide show and
return to the Images folder.
The Sounds folder contains the Default
sounds and your voice recordings. From here
you can manage, send or set sounds as
ringtones.
01
Using a sound
04
Selecting Options during the slide show
presents further choices:
Repeat on/off - Decide whether you want
the slide show on repeat or not.
1 Press
2
3
4
5
or
then select
.
Scroll to and select Sounds.
Select Default sounds or choose from the
list of voice recording files.
Select a sound and choose Options, Play
or just press
to listen to it.
Select Options, Set as and choose from
Ringtone and Ringtone ID.
02
03
05
06
07
08
Videos
The Videos folder shows the list of
downloaded videos and videos you have
recorded on your phone.
Watching a video
1 Press
or
then select
.
2 Scroll to and select Videos.
just press
.
Get creative
3 Select a video and choose Options, Play or
35
My stuff
Using options while video is paused
Using the video options menu
By selecting Options, the video you are
playing will be in pause mode and you can
choose from:
Delete - Delete the video.
Send via - Send the video in a Multimedia
message, by Bluetooth or by Email.
File - Rename the video, Move the selected
video to a folder, View the Information (Name,
Date, Size, Playback and Copyright).
Landscape / Full mode - Change how you
view your video.
In the Videos folder, select Options to bring up
the following list of options.
Play - watch the selected video.
Delete - Delete the selected video.
Send via - Send the video using a
Multimedia message, Bluetooth or email.
File - Rename the video, or view the
information (Name, Size, Date, Playback and
Copyright).
New folder - Create a new folder within the
main Videos folder.
Multi delete - Select more than one video
clip to be deleted.
Delete all - Delete all the clips in your Video
folder.
Sort by - Arrange your videos by Date, Type
or Name.
List view / Thumbnail View - Change the
way you view your videos.
Sending a video clip
1 Select a video by using the arrow keys.
2 Select Options, Send via and choose from
Get creative
36
Multimedia message, Bluetooth or
Email.
3 If you choose Multimedia Message or
Email, your video clip will be attached to a
message and you can write and send it as
normal. If you choose Bluetooth, you will
be prompted to turn Bluetooth on and your
phone will search for a device to send the
video to.
Note: The video may need to be resized before
it can be sent by MMS. Some videos may be
too large to send by MMS at all, in which case
choose one of the other sending options.
LG KM501 | User Guide
Others
The Others folder is used to store files which
are not pictures, sounds, videos, games or
applications.
You may find that when you transfer files from
your computer to your phone, they will appear
in the Others folder.
Games and Apps
External memory
Your KM501 comes with preloaded games to
keep you amused when you have time to
spare. If you choose to download any
additional games or applications they will be
saved into this folder.
If you’ve inserted a memory card it will be
displayed as a folder within My stuff. Your
external memory folder will be divided into four
further folders: Images, Sounds, Videos and
Others. Each folder will contain all the files of
that type saved to your memory card rather
than your handset.
Playing a game
1 Press
or
then select
.
2 Scroll to and select Games & Apps.
3 Select the game of your choice and choose
Options, Play or just press
.
Using the games options menu
In the Games folder, select Options to bring
up the following list:
Play – Select this to play the game.
Information - View the Name, Version,
Vendor, Data-size and Domain of the file.
Using your phone as a Mass
storage device
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Get creative
Your KM501 can be used as a mass storage
device, just like a USB stick. This is a great way
of moving your files from your computer to your
phone. In order to use the phone as mass
storage device, you need to insert an external
memory card. When connected to PC through
USB cable only external memory card will be
accessed.
1 Press
or , select
then
Connectivity.
2 Select USB Connection mode.
3 Scroll to Mass storage and select OK.
4 Insert the smaller end of the USB cable
into the USB cable connector on the edge
of the KM501. Plug the larger end into the
USB port of your computer.
01
37
My stuff
5 A removable disk folder will open
automatically, if you have a memory card
inserted, showing all the folders on your
memory card.
6 Drag and drop your images, videos, music
or others into the correct folders.
7 Safely remove your phone by clicking on
the Safely remove hardware icon in
your desktop toolbar.
8 When you want to then access a file, for
example an image, press
or
then
select
followed by External memory
then Images. All the images you just
transferred will be contained in this file.
Transferring a file to your phone
You can also transfer files from your computer
to your phone using Bluetooth.
1 Make sure your phone and computer have
Bluetooth switched on and are visible to
one another.
2 Use your computer to send the file via
Bluetooth.
3 When the file is sent you will have to
accept it on your phone by selecting Yes.
4 The file will be saved within the appropriate
folder depending on its type. For example,
photographs will be saved in the Image
folder and music in the Sounds folder. If
your phone cannot identify the file type, the
file will be saved in the Others folder.
Note: Files sent using Bluetooth will be saved
to the phone memory.
Get creative
38
LG KM501 | User Guide
Multimedia
Music
Transferring music onto your phone
Your LG KM501 has a built-in MP3 player so
you can play all your favourite music.
The easiest way to transfer music onto your
phone is via Bluetooth or your USB cable.
To transfer using Bluetooth:
1 Make sure both devices have Bluetooth
switched on and are visible to one another.
2 Select the music file on the other device
and choose to send it via Bluetooth.
3 When the file is sent you will have to
accept it on your phone by selecting Yes.
4 The file should appear in MP3 Player >
All songs.
or
To access the MP3 player, press
and select
. From here you have access
to:
All songs - Contains all of the songs you
have on your phone.
My playlist - Contains any playlists you
have created as well as On the go. You
can select specific music by each of these
characteristics: Artists, Albums, Genres
and Shuffle all songs.
1 Press
or
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Playing a song
TIP! You can access the MP3 player
through the MP3 hot key
on the front. By using
the
key, you can get directly to your playlist.
01
and select
.
2 Select All songs and then the song you
want to play. Press .
to pause the song.
4 Press
to skip to the next song.
5 Press
to skip to the previous song.
6 Select Options, Minimize to hide the
music player screen so that you can
continue using your phone as normal while
music is playing.
3 Press
Get creative
39
Multimedia
Using options while playing music
Creating a playlist
Select Options and choose from:
Minimise
Natural sound on
Add to playlist
Listen via Bluetooth
Set as ringtone
Rating
Information
Settings - Change the Equalizer or Play
mode, change the music light settings or Set
shuffle to mix up the music.
You can create your own playlists by choosing
a selection of songs from the All songs
folder.
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose My playlist. External memory
should be inserted to use this option.
3 Select New, enter the playlist name and
choose Save.
4 The All songs folder will show. Select
all of the songs that you would like to
include in your playlist by scrolling to the
ones you want and pressing ; a tick
will show next to the song name. If you
accidentally add a song you don’t want,
select it and press
again to untick it.
5 Select Options, Save to store the playlist.
TIP! To change the volume while
listening to music, use the volume keys on the
side of your phone.
Playing a playlist
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose My playlist.
3 Select the playlist you would like to play
and choose View, then press
Get creative
40
LG KM501 | User Guide
.
Editing a playlist
Deleting a playlist
From time to time, you may want to add new
songs or delete songs from a playlist.
You may also want to organise your playlists.
When you want to do this, you can edit the
playlist.
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose My playlist.
3 Scroll to the playlist you want to edit and
select View, then choose Options.
Add – You can add or delete songs from
the playlist using this option.
Remove – Remove a song from the
playlist. Select Yes to confirm.
Move up/Move down – Move the song
up or down the list to change the playing
order.
Remove all – Remove all of the songs
from the playlist.
Information – View the playlist
information.
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose My playlist.
01
02
3 Scroll to the playlist you want to delete and
choose Options.
4 Select Delete and select Yes to confirm.
04
05
06
07
08
Get creative
Note:
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
As a result of the Digital Rights Management
(DRM) system, some of the media items you
download from the Internet or receive by
MMS may have a “Purchase right” menu to
access them. You can acquire the key to
purchase the right from the website which
owns the rights to the contents.
Music is copyright protected in international
treaties and national copyright laws. It may be
necessary to obtain permission or a license to
reproduce or copy music. In some countries
national law prohibits private copying of
copyrighted material. Please check the
national legislation of the applicable country
concerning the use of such material.
When an MP3 is playing on the MP3 player, if
you press MP3 short key, you can use BGM
mode. In BGM mode MP3 can be played
while other functions are being used. BGM
can be stopped on the MP3 player screen.
03
41
Multimedia
Using the radio
Your LG KM501 has an FM radio feature so
you can tune into your favourite stations to
listen to on the move.
Note: You will need to insert your headphones
in order to listen to the radio. Insert them
into the headphone socket (this is the same
socket that you plug your charger into).
Searching for stations
Get creative
42
You can tune radio stations into your phone
by searching for them either manually or
automatically. They will then be saved to
specific channel numbers so you don’t have
to keep re-tuning. You can save up to 12
channels in your phone.
To auto tune:
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose FM radio.
3 Select Auto scan then Yes.
4 Each time a station is found, your KM501
will ask if you want to save it. Select Yes
if you want to store the channel and No if
you don’t. Any stations you choose to save
will automatically be allocated to a channel
number in your phone.
LG KM501 | User Guide
To manually tune:
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose FM radio.
3 Select a channel number that you want to
save a station to and choose Edit.
4 To enter your station, you can either use
the arrow keys to search for the frequency,
or you can enter the frequency using the
keypad.
5 Select OK.
Note: You can also edit the stations you have
saved in a channel number by using the same
Edit feature you use to manually tune in
stations.
TIP! To improve the radio reception,
extend the headset cord, which functions as the
radio antenna.
Resetting channels
Sending a voice recording
1 Press
1 Once you have finished recording, select
or
and select
.
2 Choose FM radio.
3 Select Options, Reset channels. Choose
Yes to confirm the reset. Each channel will
return to the starting 87.5Mhz frequency.
Listening to the radio
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose FM radio.
3 Select the channel number of the station
you would like to listen to.
Voice recorder
Use your voice recorder to record voice
memos or other sounds.
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose Voice recorder.
to begin recording.
3 Press
4 Select Pause to pause the recording.
5 Choose Stop to end the recording.
6 Select Options, Play to listen to the
recording.
TIP! If you plan to send your recording
as a message, before you start recording,
choose Options and select Recording mode.
Choose MMS. This will ensure that the
recording fits into a message.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Get creative
Note: You can listen to all of the voice
recordings you have saved by selecting
Album.
Options.
2 Select Send via and choose from
Multimedia message, Bluetooth or
Email. If you choose Message or Email,
the recording will be added to the message
and you can write and send it as normal.
If you choose Bluetooth, you will be
prompted to turn Bluetooth on.
43
Organiser/Tools
Adding an event to your calendar
1 From the standby screen press
or
6 Scroll down once more to select whether
,
, then Calendar.
and select
2 Select the date you would like to add an
event to. You can choose a date either
by scrolling to it using arrow keys or by
selecting Options and manually entering
the date.
Note: Once you’ve already got an event
saved in your calendar, you will need to select
Go to date after selecting Options in order to
enter a date to set your event to.
3 Select Options and choose New schedule
Get organised
44
and enter the time you would like your
event to begin. Scroll down using the arrow
keys and enter the end time of your event.
4 Scroll down and enter a Subject for the
event.
5 Scroll down again and choose whether you
would like to set an Alarm for the event.
Scroll left or right to see the available
options. You can set the alarm to go off at
the starting time of the event or at a set
period of time before the event starts to
remind you the event is coming up.
the event is a one-off or if it is to be
repeated at Daily, Weekly, Monthly or
Yearly intervals. If the event is repeated,
you can also scroll down to enter an
Expiration date for when the events will
stop completely.
7 Select Save and your event will be saved
in the calendar. A triangular cursor will
mark the days that any events have been
saved to.
Editing a calendar event
1 From the standby screen press
or ,
, then Calendar.
and select
2 Choose Options and select All schedules
to see a list of all your events. Scroll
to the event you would like to edit and
select Options, View or just press .
Alternatively select the day of the event in
the calendar and choose Options, View or
just press .
3 Select Options, Edit or just press
and scroll to the event detail you want
to change. Make your modifications and
select Save to store the edited event.
Note: You can delete an event from your
calendar by selecting to view the event and
then select Options, Delete.
LG KM501 | User Guide
Sharing a calendar event
1 From the standby screen press
Adding an event to your To do list
or
,
and select
, then Calendar.
2 Select the event you would like to share
and choose Options.
3 Choose Send via and select from Text
message, Multimedia message,
Bluetooth or Email.
Adding a memo
1 From the standby screen press
and select
or
,
1 From the standby screen, press
or
and select
, then To do.
2 Select New and type Due date, Note,
Priority and Status of your new to do.
(Using the Options, you can select the date
referring to your calendar)
3 Choose Options, Save.
4 Your to do list will appear on screen and
you can View, Add, Delete and do several
things by choosing from the Options.
, then Memo.
2 Select New and type your memo.
Setting your alarm
3 Choose Options, Save or just press
1 From the standby screen press
.
4 Your memo will appear on screen the next
time you open the Memo application.
and select
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
or
,
, then Alarm clock.
2 Select New.
3 Scroll down and enter the time you would
Tip! You can edit an existing memo.
Select the one you want to edit, select Options and select Edit.
like the alarm to sound at.
4 Choose whether you would like your
Note: You can set up to 5 alarms.
Get organised
alarm to sound Once, Daily, Mon - Fri,
Mon - Sat or Sat - Sun.
5 Scroll down to choose the alarm sound.
Choose Options, Sounds to select a new
sound.
6 Scroll down and enter a name for the
alarm or keep the suggested name.
7 Select Save.
45
Organiser/Tools
Using your calculator
1 From the standby screen press
2
3
4
5
Converting a unit
or
,
and select
, then Calculator.
Press the numeric keys to input numbers.
For simple calculations, select the function
you require (+, –, ×, ÷), followed by =.
For more complex calculations, select
Function to select a command.
Select Clear to clear the screen to start a
new calculation.
Using Tip calculator
You can calculate the tip by using this
function. The process to activate the function
is same as Calculator.
Using the stopwatch
1 From the standby screen press
2
3
4
5
Get organised
46
or ,
and select
, then Stopwatch.
Select Start to begin the timer.
Choose Lap if want to record a lap time.
Select Stop to end the timer.
Choose Resume to restart the stopwatch
at the time you stopped it at, or select
Reset to begin the time again.
LG KM501 | User Guide
1 From the standby screen press
or ,
and select
, then Unit converter.
2 Choose whether you would like to convert
Currency, Area, Length, Weight,
Temperature, Volume or Velocity.
3 Scroll up to choose from the unit of
measurement you want to enter. Scroll left
and right to select a unit, then scroll down
and enter the unit quantity.
4 Scroll down to the unit conversion box and
choose the unit measurement you want to
convert into. The conversion will show
automatically in the line below.
Adding a city to your world clock
1 From the standby screen press
or ,
and select
, then World clock.
2 Select Options and choose Change time
zone and select a city.
3 Choose New city from the options to add
more cities in your list.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Get organised
47
The web
With browser at the tip of your fingers, you
can get the up to date news and weather
forecast as well as information on sports
or traffic whenever you need it. In addition,
browser allows you to download the latest
music, ringtones, wallpapers and games.
Accessing the web
1 From the standby screen press
or ,
select
and choose OK.
2 To access the browser homepage directly,
select Home. Alternately select Go to URL
and type in your desired URL.
Note: An additional cost is incurred when
connecting to this service and downloading
content. Check your data charges with your
network provider.
The web
48
LG KM501 | User Guide
Adding and accessing bookmarks
For easy and fast access to your favourite
websites, you can add bookmarks and save
web pages.
1 From the standby screen press
or ,
select
and choose OK.
2 Select Bookmarks. A list of your
Bookmarks will appear on the screen.
3 To add a new bookmark, select Options
and choose New bookmark. Enter a
name for your bookmark followed by the
URL.
4 Select Save. Your Bookmark will now
appear in the list of bookmarks.
5 To access the bookmark simply scroll to
the required bookmark and select Options,
Connect or just press . You will be
connected to your bookmarked page.
Saving a page
Viewing your browser history
1 Access your required web page as
1 From the standby screen press
or
select
and choose OK.
2 Select History and choose OK.
3 A list of web page titles you have
accessed recently will be displayed.
To access one of these pages, scroll to
the required page and select Options,
Connect or just press .
described above.
2 Choose Options and scroll to Save, select
This page.
3 Select OK.
TIP! This menu will also allow you to
save pages, and delete saved pages.
,
01
02
03
04
05
06
Changing the web browser settings
Accessing a saved page
1 From the standby screen press
select
or
and choose OK.
2 Select Saved pages.
3 Select the required page and select
Options, Connect or just press
.
,
1 From the standby screen press
or ,
select
. Select Settings.
2 You can choose the way your mobile
handles, displays and uses information
when browsing the internet. You can
amend settings within Network Profiles,
Rendering mode, Cache, Cookies,
Security certificates, Show image,
Java script and Memory in use.
3 Once you have changed your settings,
select OK.
07
08
The web
49
Settings
Within this folder you can adapt your settings
to make your KM501 personal to you.
Note: For information on call settings see
page 20.
Personalising your profiles
You can quickly change your profile from the
standby screen. Simply press
and select
, then the profile you would like to
activate. Choose from:
General
Silent
Vibrate only
Outdoor
Headset
Using the Settings menu you can personalise
each profile setting.
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Choose the profile setting you want to edit
and select Personalise.
3 For the Silent and Vibrate only profiles,
Settings
50
you can adapt the vibration. For the other
profiles, you can change all of the sounds
and alert options available in the list,
including your Call alert type, Ring tones,
Ring Volume and Message alert type and
so on (please refer to your handset for
details).
LG KM501 | User Guide
Changing your screen settings
1 Press
or
and select
.
2 Select Display and choose from:
Wallpaper - Choose a wallpaper to
appear on your screen display.
Clocks - Choose a style of the clock to
appear on your screen display.
Backlight timer - Choose how long the
backlight remains on for.
Brightness - Adjust the screen
brightness.
Home screen shortcut - Change by
selecting On/ Off if you want to display or
not home screen shortcut icons on idle
screen.
Theme - Quickly change the whole look of
your screen.
Menu style - Change the menu view from
Grid view to List view or vice versa.
Dial style - Adjust the font style for when
you are typing a phone number.
Standby text - Choose to add a message
to your standby screen.
Network name - Choose to show or hide
the network name.
Note: The longer the backlight is on for, the
more battery power is used and you may need
to charge your phone more often.
Changing your phone settings
Changing your connectivity settings
Enjoy the freedom of adapting your KM501 so
that it works in a way which suits you best.
Press
or
and select
. Choose
from the list below:
Date & time - Adjust your date and time
settings or choose to auto update the time
when you travel.
Language - Change the language of your
KM501’s display.
Display - Change your screen settings.
Connectivity - See Changing your
connectivity settings for more information.
Call - See Call settings on page 20 for
more information.
Security - See Changing your security
settings on page 54 for more information.
Flight mode - Switch the flight mode On
or Off. You will not be able to make calls,
connect to the Internet, send messages or
use Bluetooth when Flight mode is
switched on.
Power saving - Choose to set the power
saving option Always on, on for Night
only or Off.
Reset - Reset all the settings to their
factory definitions.
Memory status - See current status of
the memories (Common, Reserved and
SIM card) in your KM501.
Your connectivity settings have already been
set up by your network operator, so you can
enjoy your new phone from the off. If you
want to change any settings, use this menu.
or
and select
. Choose
Press
Connectivity. Your options are:
01
Bluetooth - Set up your KM501 for Bluetooth
use. You can adapt your visibility to other
devices or search through devices you’re
paired with.
05
Network - Your KM501 connects
automatically to your preferred network.
To change these settings use this menu.
You can also attach GPRS and add new
access points using this menu.
02
03
04
06
07
08
USB connection mode - Choose Data
service and synchronise your KM501 using
the LG PC Suite software to copy files from
your phone. If you have a memory card
inserted select Mass storage to use your
phone in the same way as you would a USB
stick. Connect to your computer and drag and
drop files to the KM501 removable device
folder. See page 37 for further details.
Settings
51
Settings
Sending and receiving your files
using Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a great way to send and receive
files as no wires are needed and connection
is quick and easy. You can also connect to a
Bluetooth headset to make and receive calls.
Before you can start sharing files with
Bluetooth, you will need to pair your device
with another Bluetooth device. For information
on pairing devices, see Pairing with
another Bluetooth device.
To switch Bluetooth on:
1 Press
or
and select
. Choose
Connectivity, then Bluetooth.
2 Select Bluetooth on/off and choose On.
3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth off.
To send a file:
1 Open the file you want to send, typically
this will be a photo, video or music file.
2 Select Options and choose Send via, then
Bluetooth.
3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on if it is not
already activated.
4 Your KM501 will automatically search for
other Bluetooth enabled devices within
range.
5 Choose the device you want to send the
file to and select Send.
6 Your file will be sent.
To receive a file:
1 To receive files, your Bluetooth must be
both On and Visible. See Changing your
Bluetooth settings for more information.
2 A message will prompt you to accept the
file from the sender. Select Yes to receive
the file.
Tip! Keep an eye on the progress bar to
make sure your file is sent.
Settings
52
LG KM501 | User Guide
Changing your Bluetooth settings:
5 Your phone will then connect to the other
1 Press
device, on which you should enter the
same passcode.
6 Your passcode protected Bluetooth
connection is now ready.
or
and select
. Choose
Connectivity, then Bluetooth.
2 Choose Bluetooth settings to make
changes to:
My visibility - Choose whether to Show
or Hide your device to others.
My name - Enter a name for your KM501.
My address - Know your Bluetooth
address.
Pairing with another Bluetooth device
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible.
2 Follow the instructions that came with your
headset to put it in pairing mode and pair
your devices.
3 Select Yes to Connect now. Your KM501
will automatically switch to Headset profile.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Settings
By pairing your KM501 and another device,
you can set up a passcode protected
connection. This means your pairing is more
secure.
1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible.
You can change your visibility in the
Bluetooth Settings menu, by selecting
My visibility, then Show.
2 Select Device list from the Bluetooth
menu and choose New.
3 Your KM501 will search for devices.
When the search is completed Pair and
Refresh will appear on screen.
4 Choose the device you want to pair with,
select Pair, enter the passcode and then
choose OK.
Using a Bluetooth headset
01
53
Settings
Changing your security settings
Change your security settings to keep your
KM501 and the important information it holds
protected.
Press
or
and select
. Choose
Security then select from the list below:
PIN code request - Choose a PIN code to be
requested when you turn your phone on.
Auto key lock - Choose a duration for
locking the key automatically.
Phone lock - Choose a security code to lock
your phone, When powered on, When SIM
changed or Immediately.
Call Barring - Select when you would like
calls to be barred.
Fixed dial number – Choose a list of
numbers that can be called from your phone.
Change codes - Change your Security
code, PIN1 code or PIN2 code.
Settings
54
LG KM501 | User Guide
Accessories
These accessories were supplied with your
KM501.
Charger
01
Data cable
and CD
02
03
Connect and
synchronise your
KM501 and PC.
04
05
Battery
User Guide
06
Learn more about your
KM501.
07
08
Stereo headset
Some of the contents in this manual
may differ from your phone depending
on the software of the phone or your
service provider.
KM501 User Guide
Accessories
Note
• Always use genuine LG accessories.
• Failure to do so may invalidate your warranty.
• Accessories may vary in different regions:
please check with our regional service
company or agent for further information.
55
Network service
Technical data
The wireless phone described in this guide is
approved for use on the GSM 900, DCS 1800
and PCS1900 networks.
A number of features included in this guide
are called Network Services. These are
special services that you arrange through
your wireless service provider. Before you
can take advantage of any of these Network
Services, you must subscribe to them through
your service provider and obtain instructions
for their use from your service provider.
General
Accessories
56
LG KM501 | User Guide
Product name : KM501
System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900
Ambient Temperatures
Max : +55°C (discharging), +45°C (charging)
Min : -10°C
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Please read these simple guidelines. Not
following these guidelines may be dangerous
or illegal.
Exposure to radio frequency energy
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
58
Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption
Rate (SAR) information.
This mobile phone model KM501 has been
designed to comply with applicable safety
requirements for exposure to radio waves.
These requirements are is based on scientific
guidelines that include safety margins
designed to assure the safety of all persons,
regardless of age and health.
• The radio wave exposure guidelines
employ a unit of measurement known as
the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. Tests
for SAR are conducted using standardised
methods with the phone transmitting at
its highest certified power level in all used
frequency bands.
• While there may be differences between
the SAR levels of various LG phone
models, they are all designed to meet the
relevant guidelines for exposure to radio
waves.
• The SAR limit recommended by the
International Commission on Non-Ionizing
Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), is 2W/kg
averaged over 10g of tissue.
LG KM501 | User Guide
• The highest SAR value for this model
phone tested by DASY4 for use at the ear
is 0.594 W/kg (10g) and when worn on the
body is 0.799 W/kg (10g).
• SAR data information for residents in
countries/regions that have adopted the
SAR limit recommended by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE),
which is 0.631 W/kg averaged over 1g of
tissue.
WARNING
• Mobile Phones must be switched off at all
times in an aircraft.
• Do not hold the phone in your hand while
driving.
• Do not use your phone near petrol stations,
fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting
operations.
• For your safety, use ONLY specified
ORIGINAL batteries and chargers.
• Do not handle the phone with wet hands
while it is being charged. It may cause an
electric shock and can seriously damage
your phone.
• Keep the phone in a safe place out of small
children’s reach. It includes small parts
which if detached may cause a choking
hazard.
• Don’t charge a handset near flammable
material as the handset can become hot
and create a fire hazard.
• Do not charge the phone when it is on soft
furnishings.
• The phone should be charged in a well
ventilated area.
“Only use batteries, chargers and accessories
approved for use with this particular phone
model. The use of any other types may
invalidate any approval or warranty applying
to the phone, and may be dangerous.”
Product care and maintenance
WARNING!
• Switch off the phone in any area where
Only use batteries, chargers and accessories
approved for use with this particular phone
model. The use of any other types may
invalidate any approval or warranty applying
to the phone, and may be dangerous.
• Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a
qualified service technician when repair
work is required.
• Keep away from electrical appliances such
as TVs, radios, and personal computers.
• The unit should be kept away from heat
sources such as radiators or cookers.
• Do not drop.
• Do not subject this unit to mechanical
vibration or shock.
• The coating of the phone may be damaged
if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper.
• Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the
unit. (Do not use solvent such as benzene,
thinner or alcohol.)
•
•
•
•
•
you are required by special regulations.
For example, do not use your phone
in hospitals as it may affect sensitive
medical equipment.
Emergency calls may not be available
under all mobile networks. Therefore, you
should never depend solely on the phone
for emergency calls.
Only use ORIGINAL accessories to avoid
damage to your phone.
All radio transmitters carry risks of
interference with electronics in close
proximity. Minor interference may affect
TVs, radios, PCs, etc.
Batteries should be disposed of in
accordance with relevant legislation.
Do not dismantle the phone or battery.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
CAUTION
59
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke
•
•
•
•
or dust.
Do not keep the phone next to credit
cards or transport tickets; it can affect the
information on the magnetic strips.
Do not tap the screen with a sharp object
as it may damage the phone.
Do not expose the phone to liquid or
moisture.
Use the accessories like earphones
cautiously. Do not touch the antenna
unnecessarily.
Efficient phone operation
Electronics devices
All mobile phones may get interference,
which could affect performance.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• Do not use your mobile phone near
60
LG KM501 | User Guide
medical equipment without requesting
permission. Avoid placing the phone over
pacemakers, for example, in your breast
pocket.
• Some hearing aids might be disturbed by
mobile phones.
• Minor interference may affect TVs, radios,
PCs, etc.
Road safety
Check the laws and regulations on the use of
mobile phones in the areas when you drive.
• Do not use a hand-held phone while driving.
• Give full attention to driving.
• Use a hands-free kit, if available.
• Pull off the road and park before making
or answering a call if driving conditions so
require.
• RF energy may affect some electronic
systems in your vehicle such as car
stereos and safety equipment.
• When your vehicle is equipped with an air
bag, do not obstruct with installed or
portable wireless equipment. It can cause
the air bag to fail or cause serious injury
due to improper performance.
If you are listening to music whilst out and
about, please ensure that the volume is at a
reasonable level so that you are aware of
your surroundings. This is particularly
imperative when near roads.
Avoid damage to your hearing
In aircraft
Damage to your hearing can occur if you are
exposed to loud sound for long periods of
time. We therefore recommend that you do
not turn on or off the handset close to your
ear. We also recommend that music and call
volumes are set to a reasonable level.
Wireless devices can cause interference in
aircraft.
• Turn your mobile phone off before boarding
any aircraft.
• Do not use it on the ground without
permission from the crew.
Blasting area
Children
Do not use the phone where blasting is in
progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any
regulations or rules.
Keep the phone in a safe place out of the
reach of small children. It includes small
parts which may cause a choking hazard if
detached.
Potentially explosive atmospheres
• Do not use the phone at a refueling point.
Emergency calls may not be available
under all mobile networks. Therefore, you
should never depend solely on the phone
for emergency calls. Check with your local
service provider.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not transport or store flammable gas,
liquid, or explosives in the compartment
of your vehicle as your mobile phone and
accessories.
Emergency calls
61
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Battery information and care
• You do not need to completely discharge
•
•
•
•
•
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
62
•
•
•
the battery before recharging. Unlike other
battery systems, there is no effect that
could compromise the battery’s
performance.
Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG
chargers are designed to maximize the
battery life.
Do not disassemble or short-circuit the
battery pack.
Keep the metal contacts of the battery
pack clean.
Replace the battery when it no longer
provides acceptable performance. The
battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of
times until it needs replacing.
Recharge the battery if it has not been
used for a long time to maximize usability.
Do not expose the battery charger to direct
sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as
in the bathroom.
Do not leave the battery in hot or cold
places, this may deteriorate the battery
performance.
There is risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced by an incorrect type.
LG KM501 | User Guide
• Dispose of used batteries according to
the manufacturer’s instructions. Please
recycle when possible. Do not dispose as
household waste.
• Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Africa Countries
Morocco
Tunisia
Libya
Algeria
Kenya
Nigeria
South Africa
Memo
Memo
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻝ ﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪8 .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪10 ...................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪12 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪13 ....................................‬‬
‫‪ 02‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪14 ...................................‬‬
‫‪ 03‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪16 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪16 .................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪16 ............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ‪16 ....................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪17 .........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪17 ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪18 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪18 .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪19 .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪19 ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪20 .......................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪21 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪21 ........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪21 .....................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪21 .......................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪22 .............‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪22 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪22 ...............‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪23 ........SIM‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪23 .....................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪23 .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪24 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪24 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪24 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪24 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪25 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪25 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪26 ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ‪26 ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ‪27 ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪27 ............‬‬
‫‪ 04‬ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪28 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪28 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪28 .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪28 ..............‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪29 ............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ‪29 .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪30 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪30 .......‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ّ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪31 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪31 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪31 .................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪31 ..............‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ‪32 ..............‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪32 .....‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪33 .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪33 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪33 .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪34 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪34 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪34 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪34 ............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪35 ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪35 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‪35 .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪35 ...................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪35 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ‪36 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ‪36 ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪36 ................‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪36 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪37 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺐ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪37 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪37 ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪37 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ‪37 .................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪38 ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪39 .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪39 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪39 .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪39 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪39 .....‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪40 .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪40 ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪40 .............................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪41 ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪41 ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪41 ............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪42 ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪42 ..........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪42 .................................‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪43 ........................‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 05‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ 07‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪44 ..................................‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪44 .......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪44 ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪45 .......................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ‪45 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪45 ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ‪45 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪46 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪46 .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪46 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ‪47 .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪50 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪50 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪50 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪51 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪51 ...............‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪52 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‪53 ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪53 ................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪54 .........................‬‬
‫‪ 06‬ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ ‪48 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪48 .............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ‪48 .....‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪49 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪49 .................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪49 ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ‪49 ...............‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 08‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪55 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪56 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪56 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪56 .............................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ‪56 .....................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪58 ....................‬‬
7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ .KM501‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.11-10‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ّ 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟـ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫* ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪URL‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ*‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺰﺝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫* ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍً ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﺃﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ“ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﻋﺎﻡ“ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ“ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ“ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮّﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ GPRS‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫‪ EDGE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪+‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.C‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻀﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ +‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 6‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ .1‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪،‬ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻠﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻀﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ـ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً؛ ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺑﺤﺜﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ – ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ – ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ – DTMF‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟـ‪:‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء…‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪/SIM‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻼ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء…‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﺎء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ @‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺯﻣﻼﺋﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺘﻚ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣﻼء ﻭ‪ VIP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﻴﺸﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ::‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SIM‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Abc‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬
‫ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪:‬‬
‫‪ T9‬ﺗﻜﻬﻨﻲ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.Abc‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪ T9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ T9‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .T9‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ T9‬ﺗﻜﻬﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Abc‬ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ T9‬ﺗﻜﻬﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺳﺎً ﻣﻀﻤًّﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪,8‬‬
‫‪ 3 ,6 ,6 ,4 ,7 ,3 ,5 ,3‬ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ’‪.‘telephone‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪Abc‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪Abc‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Abc‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ ،hello‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ 5‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ‪ 6‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،KM501‬ﻓﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ـ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ـ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ‪ -‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ -‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ـ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ‪ - :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺭﺳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﻭءﺓ ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 160‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗُﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪ًّ KM501‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،X.400‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.ERMES‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺭﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ -‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ GSM‬ﺃﻭ ‪.GPRS‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪ًّ KM501‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﻮﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ـ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻄﺎً ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺎً ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺳﻴُﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺛﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ـ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻓﻊ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.C‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ – ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻣﻌﻴًّﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ 5‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ 3‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ٍ 10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰءﺍً ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ّ -‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺖ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ -‬ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ـ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍً‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ )‪ ،QV: 320X240‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،V:640X480‬ﻭ ‪،1M: 1280X960‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.(2M: 1600X1200‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﺘُﻐﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ّ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.MMS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ 320 x 240‬ﺃﻭ ‪.176 x 144‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻣﻌﻴًّﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ REC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍً ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﻴﺾ ـ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﻓﺮﺯ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ـ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ ـ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ّ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪ -‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ـ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.35‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ -‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ -‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘُﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺣﺴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺭﺓ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻭﺃﻛﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﺎً ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ـ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ـ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ـ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ـ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ـ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ـ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ -‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘُﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﻴّﻦ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﻣﺤﻤًّﻼ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺄﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺗﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺿﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .USB‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻛﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ‪ .KM501‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺐ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻨﻮﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ّ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘُﺤﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ـ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ ـ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﺰﺝ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟـ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪ KM501‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ < MP3‬ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ـ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ؛ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ – ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ – ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ – ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ – ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ – ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ – ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪(DRM‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DRM‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء“ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ BGM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪:‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ‬
‫‪ KM501‬ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG KM501‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ FM‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻄﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ّ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻀﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﻬﺮﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺗﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻣﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ‪،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )‪ ،+‬ﻭ–‪ ،‬ﻭ *‪ ،‬ﻭ ÷(‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ =‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍً‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺴﺢ“ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻟﺨﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻳﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ URL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ‪.URL‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺟﺎء ﻭﺻﻔﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺳﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ،Java script‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.KM501‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.20‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺮﺍ )ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻄﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ـ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘّﻊ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.KM501‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 54‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ -‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (SIM‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.KM501‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ـ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ KM501‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ـ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ‪ GPRS‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ - USB‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪ PC Suite‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .USB‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .KM501‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 37‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫ‬
‫ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻬﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺭﺍﻗﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ـ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.KM501‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ KM501‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺁﻣﻨﺎً ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KM501‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻣﻨﺎً ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ـ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪KM501‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ - PIN‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.KM501‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ KM501‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠّﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪.KM501‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪Țnjƀ Ǡź ȜȢǞűǞƓȚ ȝƾƁǞƄƤȚ ǒƯŮ ǗƴƄƈů NjŻ‬‬
‫‪ǃžƾſǍŮ ǟŽȘ ȹ ȚȢƾƶƄŴȚ ǙŽȣȶ ǙƱůƾƀ ǜŸ ǚƸŽNjŽȚ‬‬
‫‪.ǀžNjƒȚ ǍźǞž ȶȖ ǗůƾƷŽȚ‬‬
‫‪ȳNjƈƄƉƓȚ ǚƸŽȢ KM501‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺎء ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪GSM‬‬
‫‪ ،900‬ﻭ‪ ،DCS 1800‬ﻭ‪.PCS1900‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪KM501 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪/ GSM 900 / DCS 1800 :‬‬
‫‪PCS 1900‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ +55 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ 45+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪ 10- :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪(SAR‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ KM501‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ّ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ .SAR‬ﻭﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ SAR‬ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،LG‬ﻓﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫• ﺣﺪ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻳﻦ ‪Commission on‬‬
‫‪Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ((ICNIRP‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ّ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ DASY4‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 0.594‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ )‪10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻡ( ﻭﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 0.799‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺘﺒﻨﻰ ﺣﺪ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Electrical and Electronics‬‬
‫‪ Engineers (IEEE‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 0.631‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻏﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ (1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺩﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ”ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ”ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ”ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ“ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫“ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪“.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﺒﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝﻝﺍﻉﻑﻭ ﻥﻡﺁ ﻡﺍﺩﺥﺕﺱﺍ ﺕﺍﺩﺍﺵﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ّ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ّ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ّﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫•‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ | LG KM501‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising